JP2021078801A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of freedom in design without sacrificing appearance of the game machine because of electronic components.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an electronic component (for example, an LED boar 303) provided so as to be visible from a player; a specific member (for example, a base member 301) that is provided around the electronic component and is formed in color similar to that of the electronic component; and a light-transmitting member (for example, a cover member 302) that is a member having a light-transmitting property and allows the player to visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern 331 formed so as to spread over the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-12

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Some pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, are provided with electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as an LED (light emitting diode).

As a game machine of this type, for example, a game board and a display device arranged apart from the game board on the back side are provided, and an opaque frame member is provided between the game board and the display device to play a game. Some of them prevent the inside of the gaming machine from being exposed from the gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display unit of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-296205

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled by making the electronic parts such as the display means and the light emitting means visible to the player, these electronic parts are made of frame members. It is necessary to install it inside the gaming machine that is invisible to the player, but there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design cannot be increased because the arrangement position of the electronic component is limited.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom in design without spoiling the appearance of the gaming machine by electronic components.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
With
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12),
further,
Operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.)
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display effect in step S172. (Such as the production control CPU 120 that executes processing) and
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172) using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and vibrates between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Different aspects (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, there has been a technique of providing a vibrating means on a hitting ball launching handle as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the production by vibration, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game when the production by vibration is executed. ing.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.)
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display effect in step S172. (Such as the production control CPU 120 that executes processing) and
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172) using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and vibrates between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The modes are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the drawing command for effect which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect drawing composition processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the image processing which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the image display example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. It is a front view which shows the light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the 1st effect unit diagonally from the front. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is E cross-sectional view. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 10-11 (B). (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the 1st production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). (A) is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view which shows the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 10-20. It is a KK sectional view of FIG. 10-20. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual appearance state of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a vibration effect and an example of a jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing and the effect period of a vibration effect and a line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect device about the feature part 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example at the time of executing the operation part effect pattern and the specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the continuous effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the timing which can execute the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect which makes a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect period which can execute a specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the music reproduction execution example.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player,
A predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, and the like.
With
The predetermined member is characterized in having a color non-similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, a general-purpose product can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic component is inconspicuous because it is located away from the display means that the player pays attention to.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third forms.
A protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3A) provided above the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and protruding toward the player from the electronic component is provided.
The protruding portion is characterized in that it is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component becomes a shadow of the protruding portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and the specific member (for example, base member 601,801) are dark (for example, black) (variation example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the electronic component is easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion, so that it becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The specific member is characterized in that the color brightness or saturation is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) that shares at least a part of the form of the circuit pattern (for example, the printed wiring board 320) formed on the circuit board. It is provided (see Fig. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth form.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a predetermined region (for example, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined region (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A decorative portion (for example, a decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401) is provided. (See Fig. 10-19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic component is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the decorative portion, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts.
A plurality of predetermined decorative portions are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number is larger than that of the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th forms.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 402) corresponds to a boundary corresponding region (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401). It has (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The translucency of the boundary-corresponding region is lower than the translucency of the non-boundary-corresponding region.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelveth forms.
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 13th aspects.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, a second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to light emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 15th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment.
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is an inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light by being emitted from the entire front surface of the 405 substantially evenly forward and incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to surface emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
Around the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 803) and the specific member (for example, base member 801), an effect means (for example, a third effect unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. Provided (see Fig. 10-20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, so that the electronic components are less noticeable, thus increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is provided on the player side (front side) of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (FIG. 10). -20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 18th forms.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is more visible than the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803). Is characterized by its high color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 19.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light emitting means (for example, LEDs 604A and 604B for the third effect) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member is further provided.
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are less noticeable. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
The plate thickness of the translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the translucency of the translucent member is lowered, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 22.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color.
The predetermined color is characterized in that it is a similar color to the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301).
According to this feature, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component or the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 indicates that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. , Display the screen for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the gaming machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the gaming board 2 when the back surface side of the gaming machine 2 is visually recognized in the open state of the gaming machine frame. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32 is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses after the start time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out signal is used as a time-out signal. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. The variable data read process for reading the variable data, the reception process for the CPU 91AK131 to receive various signals from the outside, the transmission process for the CPU 91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK 132 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read the compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the character image data, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of them, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 is input with character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the character image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. Good. In the text image renderer 91AK146, text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area for the effect control program and the like. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. I just need to be there. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multi-encoded stream may be used. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode or form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. is there. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, and is an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Any unit may be used as long as it can be recognized. Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP 91AK 132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of the moving image display. Anything that does. The voice-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the sound effects such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of the text image, and writes the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a text image designation information and a text display setting information set in association with each other in a single text display period. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period are used by using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image is started.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. Good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field can be set to display decorations added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, a part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Thereby, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display it. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. The text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2) display text in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed depending on the reach effect content or the like even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is performed. Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified into Gothic typeface called AA_gothic, font size is 48px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, and text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF. The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. Good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified into Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, a part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to a plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. I just need to be there. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in, for example, the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. Therefore, it becomes easy to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the contour is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image of 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of variable display has a high rate of "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing a line of "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, a gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around the text image and display it by displaying the display color of or shadow, the boundary display by bevel or embossing, the layer style that adds brilliance, or a combination of some or all of them. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 8-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets each italic whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image in an enlarged or reduced manner, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. Any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, may be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image or in addition to the display color of the text image in the corresponding text display period, the origin coordinates, the font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters such as cursive and cursive is multiplexed or compressed and encoded as a part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from the moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require the field data related to the font setting, it may be configured without including the field data related to the font setting such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the amount of the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to a sound effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be possible to change at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green to light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display colors in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. Good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not a specific motion of the player is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operation rods of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the push button 31b, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range in which the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image of the above and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
The configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image, a character image using data related to a common character image is used. It may be additionally displayable.

(Explanation of feature parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first hold display area 01AKB1, a second hold display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 01AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the number of the first hold storages. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first hold display area 01AKAB1, and the second hold display area 01AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 01AKB1, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display area 01AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 01AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, by displaying an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display, the active display may be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, the variable display of the small symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. By displaying the small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of a drawing command for an effect. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as drawing commands for a plurality of effects. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command in which color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is instructed. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command in which a color blend that inverts color information is instructed. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification is instructed. The command 01AKG04 is a drawing command in which a color blend for monochrome conversion is instructed. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by rotation is instructed. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructed to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for the effect may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a command group for performing drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK 131 as a command sequence in which a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK 132 are combined. In VDP91AK132, the drawing process can be executed in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for an effect may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculation. For example, in a drawing command in which color blending is instructed, a drawing command for each effect may be functioning by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, in the internal register of VDP91AK132, control data for specifying an operation target included in a display list, numerical data for specifying parameters, and other register values are stored, and register values corresponding to execution commands are stored. Drawing according to the display list starts.

When color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is executed in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by, for example, texture mapping of a bilinear interpolation method for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by executing a compositing process by color blending, for example, alpha blending. After that, by executing the enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the blurred image.

When executing a color blend that inverts the color information in response to the command 01AKG02, for example, the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) indicated by the image data is set to the maximum value (for example, 255). Executes the difference calculation process of. For example, when the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80 = 175. For the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information included in the image data is included in the image data so that the image becomes an inverted image by executing the same difference calculation process. Can be changed to draw the generated image.

When executing a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification in response to the command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as an enlargement ratio and a reduction ratio of the image are generated. For example, for an image having a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images such as an image having a display magnification of 102% and an image having a display magnification of 104% are generated. Blur processing is performed by performing a composition process by color blending, for example, alpha blending, using the plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the resulting image.

When executing a color blend for monochrome conversion in response to the command 01AKG04, for example, the monochrome conversion calculation process is executed for each pixel for the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) indicated by the image data. To do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB value into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion calculation process in this way, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is monochrome-converted.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation corresponding to the command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images having different rotation angles of the images are generated. For example, for an image having a rotation angle of 0 °, two types of rotation images such as an image having a rotation angle of 2 ° and an image having a rotation angle of 4 ° are generated. An image that has been blurred by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of rotated images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to be.

When changing the offset amount of the image position corresponding to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, the coordinate value conversion process for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, the position information when drawing an image, such as a UV coordinate value, is changed according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

As described above, the effect drawing command may include a command such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that can draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data. Further, the effect drawing command may include a command such as command 01AKG06 that changes the position information corresponding to the image data to enable drawing of the generated image. In addition, the drawing command for the effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing arbitrary attribute information related to the image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing the composition process by color blending.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and an effect image or the like showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect during reach so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays an effect image showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Draw as much as possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, 01AKL1. May be good. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is high. You can do it like this.

The VDP91AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are superposed and combined as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the effect image can be drawn and displayed by a drawing process different from the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing composition processing executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing composition process is executed when, for example, a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of VDP91AK132. When the effect drawing / compositing process is started, the image data to be processed for the effect is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be processed is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the buffer area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or VRAM91AK147 by accessing the image data address specified by the drawing command, and transfers the image data to the work area of VRAM91AK147. And memorize it. As the image data to be processed by the effect, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers.

After that, the effect color blend is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, VDP91AK132 may execute any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. Color blending may be performed according to the above. In the case of the command 01AKG06, the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position in the texture mapping may be executed.

After step 01AKS02, the images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image obtained by performing the effect color blending in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 is drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing the effect color blend. it can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be drawn is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer by step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the VRAM91AK147 for screen display. It may be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As the image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, is specified by a drawing command by a drawing command. As a result, the image drawn on either of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 is drawn for screen display without executing the effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

As described above, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute the drawing process for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 by using the image data stored in the predetermined area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Further, by executing the effect drawing composition process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image drawn on any one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer. On the other hand, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When the display list including the normal display drawing command is transferred without including the effect drawing command, the VDP91AK132 can execute the normal drawing composition process different from the effect drawing composition process. In the normal drawing composition process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and causes the VRAM91AK147 to read the image data to be drawn. Then, it may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. In this case, for the image drawn on any of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 and the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, the color information of the image data and the like are changed without executing the effect color blend. It can be drawn for screen display without.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by the effect drawing composition processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing command for the effect, as the image data to be processed by the effect, the image data 01AKD03 and the layer of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer. The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 are designated, respectively. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing / compositing process, the VDP91AK132 stores the image data in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like and temporarily stores the image data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4, and the effect arranged on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP91AK132 executes an effect color blend on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing / compositing process. For example, when a color blend to be converted to monochrome is specified by the command 01AKG04 as a drawing command for an effect, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low priority display layer by step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing composition processing. For example, the image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 and stored in order from the display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or the hidden surface may be erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Remember with. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second, superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, superimposed on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

Then, the VDP91AKD132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the display layer having a high priority by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS04. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first specified as the image data to be drawn among the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer. , The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, the VDP91AK132 writes and stores the image data in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out, superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted into image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information is changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 has priority for display. The data is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the degree. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, various production images such as a background image, a production image showing a decorative pattern, and a production image for increasing the chance during reach are displayed by drawing by a specific drawing process such as an effect color blend. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by a normal drawing process that does not perform color blending for effects, and the effect image showing a hold display or active display, an effect image showing a small pattern, and the like are used for the progress of the game. It is possible to display a related predetermined image.

FIG. 9-6 shows an image display example by executing the effect drawing composition processing. The VDP91AK132 can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing composition process when the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred. ..

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process among the effect color blends is displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are drawn by a monochrome conversion calculation process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display a production image. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to draw a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-6 (B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG02 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the difference calculation process among the effect color blends can be displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and drawing a value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data is converted and drawn by the difference calculation process or the like to draw the image for production. Can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed by drawing without converting the value of the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for an effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are subjected to a compositing process for blurring by bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG03 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform image data as a specific drawing process by a compositing process for blurring by changing the magnification. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG05 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are converted into the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by rotation as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG06 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data and the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data can be displayed on a specific layer. Can be displayed. As a result, even if the production image is drawn using common image data, different image processing can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the color information or the position information is changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the reach effect content. The jackpot reliability for each reach effect is the ratio of the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state in the case where each reach effect is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different according to the reach effects of a plurality of types of super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern. I just need to be there.

SP reach A1 to A3 are reach productions of super reach with lower jackpot reliability than SP reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach". SP reach B is a reach production of super reach with higher jackpot reliability than SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Is. Therefore, when the reach effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" only once in five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect content may include an effect mode in which a part of the reach can recognize the commonality. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images common to each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, in SP reach A1 to A3, a common character image may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, in SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach B, a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference from the other cases can be recognized in any one of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images different from each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may display character images different from each other in animation. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized is an arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, an arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an arbitrary light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It may be the light emission of the above, an arbitrary operation using the movable member for effect, or a combination of a part or all of them.

When a reach effect that becomes a super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command may be selected and executed. As a drawing effect, the image drawn according to the effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display the image drawn according to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. Good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if a case is included in which an effect by displaying an image drawn according to only a normal display drawing command is executed without executing a specific drawing effect. Good.

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a setting example of the drawing effect content according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, as a plurality of drawing effect patterns, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are prepared in advance. A part or all of the drawing effect contents is different depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include the presence / absence and type of the drawing effect by the effect display and the presence / absence of the drawing effect by the strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include an effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. The drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which the color information included in the image data is changed and drawn when the drawing command for the effect is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include monochrome conversion effect and color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses the command 01AKG04 among the drawing commands for the effect to draw and display the effect image subjected to the monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. As described above, the effect display may be any effect as long as it can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. As for the effect display, for example, the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data may be displayed by using the command 01AKG06 among the drawing commands for the effect.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single color (for example, black or white) image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed for each predetermined number of frames. Is. The strobe display may be executed for an image drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, the strobe display may not be executed for the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 which are special layers. As described above, while the strobe display can be executed in the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, there may be a limitation as a limit that the strobe display is not executed in the range of the image drawn on the special layer. In addition to the strobe display, a pause display may be displayed. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. In addition, when the strobe display is not executed, the pause display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawings are drawn at a ratio corresponding to the variable display result and the reach effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, according to the variable display result and the reach effect content, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "missing" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing is performed at a ratio of 60% (= 60/100). The effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and 5% (= 5). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at the ratio of / 100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the ratio of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the ratio of 5% = (5/100). Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (= 5/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA2 is determined at a rate of 15% (= 15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (= 30/100). Due to such a determination ratio, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display. On the other hand, the drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of the effect display and the strobe display. Then, among the cases where the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big hit", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". The ratio of drawing effect patterns other than the above is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed as compared with the case where the specific drawing effect is not executed. , The variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. Further, in the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the determination ratio is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach effect content is SP reach B, it is possible to determine only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and a restriction is provided so that it is not determined other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach A1 to A3, is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, which may reduce the interest of the game. is there. Therefore, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit as a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being hindered by the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKAB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. .. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is increased by executing the specific drawing effect, so that the jackpot reliability is low. Even in the case of the reach effect of, the player's expectation can be raised by executing the specific drawing effect, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

Even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. May be limited as.

FIG. 9-9 (A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach. When the variable display of the super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as the effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach effect after the reach is established. The effect execution period D1 is a period from the start of the reach effect execution period in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed to the start of the chance up effect execution period in which the chance up effect can be executed. The effect execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period in which the result notification effect can be executed after the chance-up effect execution period ends. The result notification effect may be an effect that notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach effect that becomes the super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification effect execution period. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period, the specific drawing effect SPE is performed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than Become feasible. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed even during the effect execution period D2, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed.

Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , The specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute a light emission effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output. Good. Further, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", or "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols that make up the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to carry out a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. The effect may be executable.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the reach effect of super reach is executed during the execution of the variable display, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0. Regardless of whether or not, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. is there. In the normal drawing effect NOR by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR is not executed regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Becomes executable. In the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. It may be. When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is normally drawn in the effect execution period D4 for confirming and notifying the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. It suffices to return to the execution of the production NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executed in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the judgment result that the reach effect of the super reach is executed as the judgment result at the time of starting winning. You may do so. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2. An image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by a normal drawing process.

When the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is feasible. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is controlled so that the light emission effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. As described above, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process by not executing the light emission effect. The display can improve the game entertainment.

When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is not limited to the one provided with the restriction that the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. There may be restrictions on the mode of effect of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of effect of the light emission effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of light emitted (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emitting effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, so that the amount of effect is reduced. It may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited to be reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. May be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (for example, single color emission) as compared with the case where the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Such restrictions may be provided.

9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effect and drawing effect. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", the common decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers "7" are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the reach is established. , The reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it suffices if it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM02 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show the effect execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach effect of the super reach progresses in the effect execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D1, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM05 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKAM05 and 02AKAM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach, a reach effect in which the effect content differs depending on the variable display result is executed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the final notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach ends, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 11 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02 AKM05. However, the pause display may be started corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, the image drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, may be copied to the copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. In addition, it is controlled not to execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by the strobe display.

FIG. 9-11 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 12 when strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 11. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM12, an image that is entirely black is drawn and displayed as a single color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 that are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 13 in the case of executing an effect display which is a pause display during the strobe display, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 12. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during the strobe display by repeating the pause display started in the effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to layer 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of VRAM91AK147, the same image pause as in the effect execution example 02AKM11 may be paused and displayed repeatedly.

FIG. 9-11 (D) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 14 in which the same image as the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 13. FIG. 9-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13, following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 16 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02 AKM 12 and 02 AKM 14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 15. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16, following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying the image drawn using the image data and the image of a single color having a setting different from the image data, it is possible to perform the strobe display and the pause display. .. After the strobe display of the effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to the execution, and the light emission effect is controlled to be executed.

Such a strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to the drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed according to the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be used by the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. The production execution example 02 AKM21 is shown. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, is displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 22 when strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 21. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM22, similarly to the effect execution example 02AKM12 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which a specific drawing effect SPE by a monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach, following the effect execution example 02AKM22. Is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM23, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02 AKM 21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12 (D) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 24 in which the same image as the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 23. FIG. 9-12 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, is displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24, following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 27 when the reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26, following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, the image by monochrome conversion drawn by reducing the number of colors of the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, is a dedicated image using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be different, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display effect is prevented while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the game entertainment.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM31 to be performed is shown. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 32 when strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 31. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13 (C) shows an effect execution example in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows 02AKM33. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. , The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13 (D) shows the effect execution example 02AKM34 that repeatedly displays the same image as the effect execution example 02AKM32, following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 34. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 37 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image by color information inversion drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, is dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is feasible regardless. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. Since it is possible to give different impressions to the player, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display is displayed while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the production and improve the game entertainment.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed, while the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes high, so that the player's expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature units 01AK and 02AK, and has the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image having a setting different from the image data. In such a strobe display, a part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance and displayed. For example, when an effect image to be a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and the determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

It has been described that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display unit of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmission is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided in the vicinity of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Therefore, a light emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in response to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the light emission display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it may be controlled not to execute the light emission display effect during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing the button light emitting unit mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is sufficient that the button light emission effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emission effect pattern or the like during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it may be controlled not to execute the button light emission effect during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable may be included in a specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting where the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information or the like can be obtained. May be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display may be changed to a monochrome image having a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling monochrome display of such hold display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display related to variable display such as hold display and active display, the specific drawing effect SPE If the change effect is executed during the execution of, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE. When the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the hold display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the hold display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer for drawing an effect image showing the launch direction of the game ball so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect that is a left-handed effect or a right-handed effect, when a launch promotion effect is executed, an effect image that encourages the game ball to be fired toward the left game area or the right game area is displayed. It suffices if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game can be played by firing a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as movement paths through which the game ball can flow down. The first route may be a right-handed route which is a right-handed game area in the game area, and the second route may be a left-handed area which is a left-handed game area in the game area. Then, when it is the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. Anything is fine. In addition, when it is the second state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the second path, a second promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is displayed. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the effect image prompting the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed in a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process, various display effects are executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium. Then, the game entertainment can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, an effect image indicating that the effect output amount can be changed, such as volume, screen brightness, and a part or all of the light emission amount, may be drawn and displayed. As the display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer for drawing an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so as to be displayable may be included.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, detection by various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door opening sensor, a grand prize opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball burnout sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start port switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the generated error is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer having the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning is displayed. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, various display effects can be achieved while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be executed to improve the game entertainment. In the case of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which the light emission effect is not executed, the light emission notification at the time of abnormality may be executed by causing the light emitting member to emit light. In this way, the notification regarding the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer for drawing the effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the suggestion display layer, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion images determined at different ratios can be drawn and displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value, whether or not to execute the pachinko game machine and the effect mode It suffices if the setting suggestion effect having a different determination ratio can be executed. For example, one of a plurality of setting suggestion images may be selected at a different ratio depending on the setting value, and the selected setting suggestion image may be drawn and displayed on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is made. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. An image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, so that an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is suggested. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. By making it possible to draw and display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer by a specific drawing process, the display of an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player is diversified. , The game entertainment can be improved.

At least some of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of applying to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. , As the navigation notification, an effect image for notifying the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that draws an effect image used for navigation notification so that it can be displayed. For example, in the notification display layer, when the order of stopping the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is notified, if the stop order image showing the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. Good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the notification is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. The visibility of the image that notifies the operation mode can be displayed by drawing the image that notifies the operation mode when the variable display in the slot machine is stopped in a special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately securing the above.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect image is produced according to an instruction of a display list. A technique for tilting and deforming a pachinko machine to display a slingshot image, or a pachinko / pachislot machine for drawing a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated by using an inverted image are arranged, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. Was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, the visibility of an important image may be lowered because the entire image is changed. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of gaming while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images.
The game machine related to the feature unit 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing is provided, and the image processing means draws in response to image data, for example, normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command for normal display, and normal drawing processing. It is possible to execute drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command for an effect. For example, a plurality of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 having different priorities. An image in each of the layers can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include, for example, a specific layer such as layers AKL03 to AKL05 and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. According to steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed. For example, according to step 01AKS04, the special layer is drawn by the normal drawing process and is related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity, appropriately secure the visibility of the image, enable the execution of various display effects, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), for example, monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn (for example, the color information is inverted), for example, the color information is inverted. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed. Of a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the effect execution period D2), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the first period, and the light emitting means may not be made to emit light in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed (for example, the effect execution period D1) and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed (for example, the effect execution period D2). In the first period, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a normal mode, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. Suggestion effects (for example, effects by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode. The effect (for example, the effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, a specific effect of pausing and displaying an image (for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 may be executed. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the image drawn using the image data and the monochromatic image may be alternately displayed on the specific layer (see, for example, the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of the decorative symbol in 5R), and reduction in a mode smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1. Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 02AK is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player such as a jackpot gaming state, for example, a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach. The first pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the second pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, which can be executed during the variable display and the ratio of the specific effect controlled to the advantageous state is different, are different. Of the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect. It is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process such as a drawing process according to the drawing command of, and among the effect periods in which a specific effect is executed, a second period after the first period, for example, an effect execution period D2. In the two periods, it is possible to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command at the time of a specific drawing effect. It is possible to display the image drawn by. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity and appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute the production by various displays, and improve the game entertainment.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn, for example, color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in the specific effect, the light emission effect by the light emitting means can be executed in the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process, and the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect can be performed. The light emission effect may be limited more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, for which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. You may not display the image. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6, and is set. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may be displayable. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second period, an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image may be alternately displayed in the case of the second pattern, for example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images such as variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small symbols in small symbol display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information image in a mode smaller than that of the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is subjected to a specific drawing process. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configurations relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK and the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, in the configuration in which the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, the first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component can be changed, or a character image using data related to a common character image is added to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. In the configuration that can be displayed, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed, and the special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer is drawn by the normal drawing process. A predetermined image related to the progress of the game may be displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern. When the second pattern is different from the first pattern in the ratio controlled in an advantageous state, the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. Further, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 includes a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. It is also called the underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hit ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. , The board surface plate 200 provided with the guide rail 211, the outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and the spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 200. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is passed through the opening 2c on the player side. It can be visually recognized from (front side). Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the area overlapping the board surface plate 200 is visible through the board surface plate 200.

Further, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area Y. Has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

The first effect unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the lower position of the image display device 5. The second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. The fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the position on the upper left side of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right position of the board surface plate 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 capable of winning a game ball flowing down the game area Y is provided.

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board surface plate 200, they can be seen through the board surface plate 200 from the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface whose front surface is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device device. It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). Is. Here, in order to help understanding, the light emitting region 506 is indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area. A collection of LED substrates 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for incident light on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 and light from the light guide plate LED 502 are collected toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member formed of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the light guide plate 501 is a plate member. It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, , A light emitting region (see the halftone dot region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)) that emits light due to light incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the inside from the right end surface 501a. The non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front, that is, does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. It has a non-light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a graphic whose peripheral edge is radial appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light is incident inside the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and moves forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 10-6 (C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine particle having a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. See the halftone dot region at 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as the first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region in which a dot pattern is formed, and is not a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region in which a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the feature portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as a pattern, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern are also included. Other display information including may be displayable.

When no light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the first The 2 effect unit 400 and the 3rd effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, in the state where the light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 is maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

In the feature portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state forming a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed by a stamper or an injection light guide plate. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which the acrylic plate and the reflector are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, and the like. You may.

In the feature portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously deformed as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface), such as a substantially triangular shape.

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are continuously formed in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LED 502.

The convex portion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condensing lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condensing lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. You may use it.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, since the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. It is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap between the gaps is such that the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by the vibration generated during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, the incident surface is incident on the condenser lens 504 even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high. The light is diffused radially in the condensing lens 504 in the left-right direction. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted to the right and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 can be diffused to some extent. Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because the radial spread is suppressed), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be emitted. Further, the light incident on the light guide plate LED 502 from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total internal reflection in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the light guide plate 504 of the light guide plate 504. It is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion having the smallest front-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since it can be guided to 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected in the light emitting region 506 toward the front side (player's side). As a result, from the player's point of view, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that the region represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits surface light on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The figure will be displayed with.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged in the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged in the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). From the player's point of view, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

(1st production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7 are a front view showing the first effect unit, and a rear view shown in FIG. 10-7. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of EE of (A). 10-10 is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 10-10 is a front view showing an LED substrate, and FIG. 10C is a front view showing a cover member. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and FIG. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 10-11 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged so as to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N1. Mainly composed of a cover member 302 to be mounted and an LED substrate 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N2, from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 301 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 312 formed in the lower part of the flat portion 311 and a rear wall portion 313A to be located slightly behind the flat portion 311. It has 313D and.

A plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A to 314E forming a part of the decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the upper portion of the flat portion 311 in the longitudinal direction, and a rear wall is formed between the convex portions 314A to 314E. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. The rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined rearward toward the upper side (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 in the front view. ing. Then, in the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LED 304, which will be described later, is located in front of the flat portion 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 and other electronic components (not shown) capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 303. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, on the back surface of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN and electronic components (not shown) for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (insulating portion on the front surface and the back surface excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape in front view, and has a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of a flat portion 311 and a recess 312 of the base member 301. It mainly has second translucent portions 322A and 322B corresponding to the first effect LED 304. Further, at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B protrudes forward from the front surface of the first translucent portion 321, and the concave portion 322D is formed on the back surface. The LED 304 for the first effect can be accommodated. Further, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be variously changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 having a hexagonal front view. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 forms a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a decorative portion 331A composed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines extending in the diagonally left and diagonally right directions. A plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by having a decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape in a front view, and by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. ..

Further, in each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E, for example, the back surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 may be sandblasted to form fine uneven portions, or a translucent sticker or the like may be attached. As a result, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the LED substrate 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side thereof is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the cover member 302. is there.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are assimilated. The boundary part BD with is difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are attached. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the 303, and while it is easy for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the first translucent portion 321. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first effect LED 304 through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Further, by arranging the milky white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky white or translucent on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, in a state where the cover member 302 is arranged on the front surface side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 of the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) Etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is two members (LEDs). Since it is provided so as to straddle the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decorative pattern 331 is provided on one member, so that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, since a part of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decorative portions 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap the front surface side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping with the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 covers the LED substrate 303. Since it is formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

Further, since the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, the mode is similar to that of the boundary portion BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish the decorative portion 331A. In the case of milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 331A.

Further, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape like the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, whereby the printed wiring is printed. Since the wiring pattern and the mode of the 320 are similar (or common), it is difficult to distinguish them, so that the LED substrate 303 is not conspicuous.

Further, the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different in mode from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, but are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD because they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since a part of the printed wiring board 320 is arranged overlapping on the front side of the printed wiring board 320, the printed wiring board 320 becomes difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of linear convex portions having a hexagonal shape flattened vertically is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the mode is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as a predetermined region that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern 331 is provided, it becomes difficult to understand that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, and thus the LED substrate. The 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position separated from the image display device 5. Since it is provided, it is located at a position away from the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to, so that it is less noticeable.

As described above, the predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is attached to the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED substrate 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 are a front view showing a variable winning ball unit in FIG. 10-13, and a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board surface plate 200 from the front side and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701, and the variable winning ball unit 700. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the lower left, and the base plate 701A of the base member 701 and the cover plate 702A of the cover member 702 are provided. Between, the game ball path 705A in which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball (game ball) in the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED substrate 703 provided with a plurality of effect LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(1st production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side at the lower position of the image display device 5, and when visually recognized from the player side, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side. 1 The right end of the effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board surface plate 200, while the first effect unit 300 is the board surface plate 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and 10-14 (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portion 322A, 322B. It is made longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A> L1B).

In the first translucent portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the first transmissive portion 321, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA. %. Further, in the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B, the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. That is, not all (100%) of the light that has entered the first translucent portion 321 and the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected in the front surface. , It is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around) at the rear. In particular, the second translucent portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of uneven portions on the back surface, so that light is more easily transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first transmissive portion 321. , The transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first translucent portion 321 (transparency is low. XA%> XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (C) and 10-14 (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y. %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2 <L1A, L2 <L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and is hard to be diffused to the surroundings until it is emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second transmissive parts 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than the translucency of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, a game) on the back surface side of the cover plate 702A is passed through the cover plate 702A from the player side. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case where the player sees through the cover member 302 and visually recognizes a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED substrate 303) on the back surface side of the cover member 302. However, since the visibility is low, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around the LED substrate 303 have the same color (black). , The LED substrate 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimensions L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B> L2), and the first production unit. The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are visually recognized from the player side, the cover member 702 is transparent. Since the visibility when the LED substrate 303 is visually recognized through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is visually recognized, the variable winning ball unit 700 located in the vicinity of the first effect unit 300. The LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, becomes more difficult to see. Further, the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED substrate 303, are of the same color (black) is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not be the same color, and may be, for example, similar colors or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (hue), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but are adjacent to each other on the hue. 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue. Includes color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors having the same tone (hue group having the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but adjacent colors on the hue (adjacent colors)" is shown in FIG. 10-16. To explain based on this, when cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), which are the three primary colors of the colorants, are arranged at an angle interval of 120 degrees in a predetermined number of hue circles (24 colors in this case). Each of the three colors is non-similar to each other. Colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel are "similar colors" and are not limited to a combination of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the color wheel.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) become similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow (M). When Y) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) is a similar color of yellow (Y). Therefore, even when the number of colors in the color wheel is less than 24 colors or 24 colors or more, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in terms of the angle of the color wheel may be regarded as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and combinations of colors included in cold colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It is preferable to include a color combination contained in a neutral color which is a chromatic color located between a warm color and a cold color.

(2nd production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in FIG. 10-17, and FIG. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. 10-18 is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). 10-19 is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 401, and the front surface of the base member 401. Mainly composed of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403, and as shown in FIG. 10-3, on the right side of the light guide plate 501, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 403 has a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of irradiating light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of irradiating light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated). (Omitted) is installed. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and is arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403 with a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A. It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, and light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B is incident on the front end surface. Light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by the reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light incident forward. Then, the light is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) in which the cross-sectional view of the light guided through the inside of the inner lens 405 in the traveling direction forms a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, or an acrylic plate and reflection. The reflective portion may be formed by a sticking dot method in which a plate is attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, or the like.

The cover member 402 has a box shape whose back surface is opened by a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED substrate 403, a convex portion 410 having a slightly enlarged shape of the LED substrate 403 when viewed from the front is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, the decorative portion 420 composed of the letter "V" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency or a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 402A formed of a concavo-convex portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421A projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421B projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. It should be noted that a light diffusing portion made of uneven portions may also be formed on the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the convex portion 410 toward the upper side and the lower side.

In the plurality of convex portions 421A and 421B, uneven portions are continuously formed on the rear end surfaces, and step portions 421C are formed at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction, so that the convex portions 410 are directed upward and downward. By extending the light so as to incline to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can be received from these uneven portions and the stepped portion 421C, and also enters. The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and the light emitted forward by the inner lens 405 is convex on the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the LED substrate 403 as an electronic component having the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side thereof is formed by the cover member 402. It is covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is assumed that the light diffusing portion is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex portions 421A and 421B from the player side. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the convex portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when visually recognized from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side in the portion BD. That is, since a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to hang (overlap) a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD is arranged by the decorative portion 420. By making it difficult to see, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front surface side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the above-mentioned decorative pattern 331, and the boundary portion BD is made difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 403 Is obscured.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at positions corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD when visually recognized from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at a position corresponding to all the portions of the boundary portion BD. It is preferable that the boundary portion BD is provided so as to overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary portion BD.

Further, since the character "V" is displayed as the logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH" are used. , Etc., characters indicating a variable display result, characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", "!!", and characters such as the model name, title, and the name of the character appearing in the gaming machine may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

Further, the LED substrate 403 has the second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decorative portion 420 to emit light, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can use the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the second effect LED 404A, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion composed of the letter "V" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, a pattern) having a mode different from that of the decorative portion 420 are provided in an area other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations are provided. It is preferable that the number of portions is larger than that of a plurality of predetermined decorative portions. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and the number of the boundary portion BD becomes more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portion may be an enlarged or reduced mode of the decorative portion, and the outer shape, form, and the like. Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. It has a region other than the convex portion 410, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to see the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

(3rd production unit 600 and 4th production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit in FIG. 10-20. 10-21 is a sectional view taken along line I-I of FIG. 10-20, and FIG. 10-B is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 10-20. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a visual state of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configurations of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. 10-26 are schematic front views showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21 (A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 is a cover member arranged so as to cover the base member 601 and the front surface side of the base member 601. FIG. 10-26 (A) shows a light emitting effect unit 630 and a light emitting effect unit 630 including an LED substrate 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601 and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 603. ) And the effect position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the effect motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source capable of moving in the vertical direction, and the effect motor 631. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect unit 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601. A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 603. The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B can irradiate light toward the front. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white. The cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIGS. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and has a plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side of the inner lens 605 is diffused and emitted forward. A light diffusing portion 605A composed of an uneven portion is provided so as to emit light from the surface.

The cover member 602 has a box shape in which the back surface is opened by a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 composed of the characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having a translucent color or a translucent sheet on which the characters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 602A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the character "XXX" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name, title, and appearance of the gaming machine appear. Characters such as a character's name, characters indicating a variable display result such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", and "!!" may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further covered with the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused through and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are decorative. It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LED 604A emits light, the "XXX" Since the peripheral edge of the character is lit, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

Further, the power transmission member 632, which forms a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emitting effect unit 630, is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft having one end facing the front-rear direction, and emits light at the other end. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect unit 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if the power can be transmitted so that the light emission effect unit 630 can be moved in the vertical direction, a rack gear, a pinion gear, or the like can be used. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801 and a cover member 802 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and a base member. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 803 mounted on the front surface of the 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 803, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, the area surrounded by the guide rails 211. In the upper left, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a box shape having a front opening, and a part of the peripheral edge thereof is formed in an arc shape along the guide rail 211. The surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED substrate 803 is formed so as to have a smaller front view shape than the base member 801 and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. The fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 803, and a plurality of the fourth effect LED 804 are arranged along the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 803 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and is placed in a region surrounded by a plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the back surface of the inner lens 805 is reflected forward by a reflecting unit 806 for reflecting the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A of the portion of the standing wall erected on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801 along the guide rail 211, and the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing portion 802A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802 so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are white, in which the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are the same color, respectively. The front side of the 801 and the LED substrate 603 and 803 is covered with a transparent cover member 602 and 802, and the light emitting effect body that emits light on the front surface when the third effect LED 604A and 604B and the fourth effect LED 804 are turned on. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), the LED substrate 603 as an electronic component having the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601 and the front side thereof is covered. It is covered with a member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 602A is formed on the cover member 602, the cover member 602 can be seen through from the player side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 having a light diffusing portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the vertical wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, so that the LED substrate 603 is a base member around the white LED substrate 603. Assimilated with 601 it is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED substrate 603, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED substrate 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801 and is arranged on the front side thereof. Is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the cover member 802, the cover member 802 is transparent from the player side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 becomes a base member 801 around the white LED substrate 803. Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801. Therefore, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED that injects light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 is included. Since the front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, the player The visibility when the LED substrate 803 including the 4th effect LED 804 is visually recognized through the inner lens 805 from the side is the LED substrate including the 3rd effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when the 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED substrate 803 is more conspicuous than the LED substrate 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), And the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is in front of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (on the player side) (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and further, the fourth While the light emitting mode of the effect unit 800 by the fourth effect LED 804 is surface emission, the light emission mode of the third effect unit 600 by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is spotlight (see FIG. 10-25). In FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for convenience of explaining the light emitting mode.

As described above, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, is located close to the player, and emits light with strong light. Therefore, the visibility when visually recognized from the player side is higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800. That is, the third effect unit 600, which is an effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided at a position near the fourth effect unit 800. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuously attracting the attention of the player than the four effect unit 800, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, and is located close to the player. Although, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third effect is illustrated, although the embodiment configured as an effect means having higher visibility than the LED substrate 803 and the base member 801 by emitting light with strong light is illustrated. The light emitting effect unit 630 of the unit 600 is visible because at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode is different from the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800. Should be high.

Further, the front surface of the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 as an effect means may be colored with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part having a color having high visibility may be provided. By using the cover member 602 molded in a color having high visibility, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced. Further, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

Further, as the effect means, an embodiment in which the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600, which can emit light by the light emitting means and can be operated by the effect motor 631, is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a light emitting means (lamp unit or the like) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or an effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be a predetermined drive source. It may be an effect unit that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves) protruding forward from the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing through the upper part of the game area Y. However, the protrusion 3A greatly protrudes forward, for example, pachinko. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game field, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by the halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game field blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED substrates 603 and 803 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protruding portion 3A that protrudes toward the player from the LED boards 603 and 803 is provided, and the protruding portion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED substrates 603 and 803 become shadows of the protrusions 3A and become inconspicuous.

Further, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 have been exemplified in the form of being white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these may be dark colors (for example, black), as described above. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less noticeable.

In the present embodiment, as a protrusion protruding toward the player above the electronic component and the specific member, a protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED substrates 603 and 803 is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protruding portion is not limited to the protruding portion projecting from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, for example, the gaming board 2 or the game. It may be composed of other gaming devices (for example, a winning ball device) or a directing device provided in the area Y. Further, the protruding portion 3A is not only fixed to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also operates from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the player can move above the electronic parts and the specific member. It may be a protruding portion protruding to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is when the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap the most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 10-26) in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the moving area E2 of the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area in which the light emitting effect unit 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 is in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting effect unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 are displayed from the player side. It becomes difficult or invisible to see through 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in a light emitting region during a moving period in which the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position or an effect period located in the effect position. By executing the light emitting effect of causing the 506 to emit light, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult to see or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side, so that the power is transmitted during the moving period and the effect period. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 from being conspicuous.

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off after the light emitting effect unit 630 is moved to the effect position and the light emitting effect of the light emitting region 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. can be visually recognized, but the light emitting effect unit By turning on the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the 630 to make the light emitting effect unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) provided so as to be operable are made visible to the player during the waiting period or the moving period waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable that the player makes it difficult or invisible from the player side, at least during the production period located at the production position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being conspicuous during the production period that the player pays attention to.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
By doing so, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
The electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they have similar colors. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member have the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A, 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. The embodiment in which the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board not provided with a light emitting diode (main substrate 11 not for production, or production). (Including control board 12 and relay board, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above, but is a member provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member (for example, a member forming a part of another unit, a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member that constitutes a part, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 forming a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components are applied as a light transmitting member is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a member having translucency even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above. If the member is provided so that the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, a different member (for example, for example) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member forming a part of another unit, a member forming a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, and the like).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to those having the same color.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are described from the player side. It may be arranged side by side at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping a part when visually recognized. Further, if the specific member is arranged and visible around the electronic component when visually recognized from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. It may have been done.

The specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, and is arranged, for example, within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. Specific members may be included.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material is applied as a translucent member has been illustrated, and the present invention has been illustrated. The material is not limited, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Further, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components by the player through the member. And, although a form in which a part or the whole area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member can be visually recognized is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is the member. If at least a part of the specific member is not visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized together. You just have to.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the base member 301 as a specific member. Although the embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members are arranged along the front side of the 401, 601, 801 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members are not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific members. It does not have to be. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged in a state of being obliquely inclined with respect to the translucent member.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the entire surface surface of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 is set to a predetermined color (black or white) is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the portion of the electronic component and the specific member that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) is a similar color. If so, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be a similar color. Further, the colors of these electronic parts and the specific member may be colored at the time of molding the member, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be colored by attaching a sticker or the like to a predetermined color. You may be.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not, for example, a predetermined electron provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player, separately from the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member. Parts (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, first start port switch 22A, second) provided around the predetermined electronic component. In those provided with a start port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), predetermined electronic components (for example, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are , It is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

As described above, the predetermined electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player are in balance with the predetermined members for fixing them. Since a general-purpose product can be used without considering the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to have the same hue and higher brightness or saturation of the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively inconspicuous.

Further, by coloring the translucent member with a color similar to that of the electronic component and the specific member, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, for example, when an electronic component such as a black LED substrate is arranged on the right side of the game board 2, it is provided around the electronic component on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5. By providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or the same color as the electronic component so as to be visible to the player separately from the specific member, the black members are arranged in a well-balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, so that the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, the electronic component can be made less noticeable by arranging the member having the same color or the same color as the electronic component at a distant position separately from the specific member.

Further, the configuration related to the feature unit 75SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the feature unit 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK and the like. For example, when the effect described by the feature units 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed by the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described by the feature unit 75SG provided around the image display device 5 Since the electronic components of the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 are less noticeable, it is possible to make the above effect look suitable.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LED, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling so as not to be performed, the periphery (for example, the game effect lamp 9) of the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) It is also possible to control so that the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer to the above) is not executed (or the amount of light is lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 or the like). By doing so, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, so that the electronic component or the specific member is prevented from becoming conspicuous. it can.

Further, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can be surface-emitted. For a light emitting member such as LED404A that is inconspicuous even if light emission is continued, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not limited) even when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is controlled so as not to be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members inconspicuous without excessively reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls can be used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the game machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is provided by the player. An electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible, and a specific member (for example, a base member 301) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to the electronic component. , 401,601,801) and a translucent member (for example, a cover member 302) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member. , 402,602,802), and the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) straddles the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). (See FIG. 10-12), and further, an operating means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the operating means. As the vibration effect that the LED vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration motor 131 based on the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). (For example, the vibration control processing of the operation unit effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) is used to execute the variable display effect processing in step S172. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (such as the effect control CPU 120). Depending on the light emitting effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and the progress of the game. Variable display in step S172 based on a specific effect execution means (for example, variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the intermediate effect process), and the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like), and the predetermined vibration effect is associated with the above. Depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern). The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration effect and the predetermined vibration effect. Examples thereof include a gaming machine having a vibration mode different from that of the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, it is possible to make the gaming machine look good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and the light emitting mode in which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state at a high rate, whether or not the vibration effect is executed at the execution timing, and so on. Since it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the special vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming field and is easy to attract the interest of the player.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and improve the enjoyment of gaming, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), as an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, an operation unit). Vibration effect execution means (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the effect pattern) and special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and the predetermined vibration effect. Along with this, a light emitting effect executing means (for example, an operation determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light A specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, jackpot confirmation notification) according to the progress of the game and the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the part effect control pattern. , A specific effect executing means capable of executing a jackpot type lottery, etc. (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203). The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, included in the operation unit effect pattern). The emission color and the jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation unit effect pattern, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05). , Etc.), the vibration state by the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect Examples thereof include gaming machines having different vibration patterns (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it may be determined whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied by confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the recovery process (step S904) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. By the recovery process in step S904, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process of step S906 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S906. The setting change process of S907 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9010). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 13 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 13 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determined judgment values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 14-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 14-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 14-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 14-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 14-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L, 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern can be changed based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not aroused, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display ends and waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 14-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 14-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 14-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 14-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is displayed as stopped. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 14-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 14-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 14-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 14-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion regarding a probability variation state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 10SH)
Next, the feature portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes an operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, a timing T2 at which the reach is established, and a normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of the timing T1 and the timing T2 or the timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4. The vibration effect can be performed in a manner in which the vibration time and the emission color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of the super reach.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effects images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the feature unit 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the always small symbol, the number of hold display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative symbol.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 10SH, and shows the layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for a game effect is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be vibrable by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight having a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B. In addition, in order to make the vibration mode of the push button 31B various, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L and 9R have a plurality of LEDs built in along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 15-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on / off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R, drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R based on the lamp signal, and has a game effect in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on / off the lamps 9B, 9L, 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp. The lighting / extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies the motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 15-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process related to the feature unit 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 15-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display variation pattern to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display, and are specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that is not linked to the advance notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed by drawing a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence / absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") / {(display result). Probability that effect A is executed when is a "big hit") x (probability that the display result is a "big hit") + (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is not a "big hit") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is performed when the display result becomes "big hit" so that the jackpot reliability corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It suffices to specify the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "big hit".

(Contents of vibration production and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 15-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot. In the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, the execution patterns SE1 to the execution patterns SE1 to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a timing T3 that is executing a normal reach reach effect and a timing T4 that is executing a super reach reach effect after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, or the super reach reach effect. Regardless of the timing T4, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect in which the light is emitted in red. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. Is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light. Is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration effect can be executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. It is possible.

Then, in this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds as compared with the case where the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". Is definitely notified.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to pay attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated and pushed for 3 seconds. When the vibration effect in which the button 31B emits light in red is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the normal reach reach effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The jackpot reliability is high. Further, even in the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T4 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed at the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. , The jackpot reliability is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the reach effect of the super reach is performed instead of the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed is further increased. be able to.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Further, when a plurality of types of normal reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effects, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects that can be executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effects are being executed is , It suffices if it is higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of normal reach.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach. Further, when a plurality of types of super reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the jackpot of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the super reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect can be regarded as a chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect in the manner of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is always executed. It is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be further increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the expectation that the vibration effect is executed in a complicated manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses.

Further, the probability that the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is sufficiently low as compared with the probability that the vibration effect of the other mode is executed. By prescribing it, it is possible to enhance the interest when it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chance of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 15-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the super reach reach effect in the variable display this time. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by a random number value and a lottery using a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same ratio regardless of which mode the vibration effect is.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In addition, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be focused on before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the relief effect may be executed after the display result of "off" is displayed, and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, when the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started even though the variable display of this time is started, There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding as if the relief effect was executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.

Further, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. ..

Returning to the description of FIG. 15-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effect, the mode of the effect to be executed, and the like (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by making the decision ratio in the lottery different according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the jackpot reliability is made different depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and its mode. Further, when the current pattern specifies the reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern is executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer, and the type and mode of the effect determined to be executed. The effect specific data that specifies the effect and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the effect execution timing by comparing with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specific data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the determined final stop symbol and the mode specified by the variation pattern this time (10SHS7). Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

After that, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and line-of-sight guidance production)
FIG. 15-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and the effect period of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before that.

When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T3. , When the timing T3 is reached, the vibration effect is started. Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance is performed 4 seconds before the timing T4. The production is started, and the vibration production is started when the timing T4 is reached. The effect period of the line-of-sight guidance effect of this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed for the first second.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
15-6 and 15-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this effect operation example, an example in which the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (A), the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed when the reach is established is reduced and displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (A), the “left” reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. And, when the reach is established, the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, is displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for directing. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified in a display mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. An effect image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of the small symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 15-6 (A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of.

A special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, display and non-display are repeated at regular time intervals with a specific display color. It is realized by continuing the display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are different from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15-1. Is provided at a remote position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, in this example, the hold display area 10SHH for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and the active display area 10SH for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution. , Is displayed. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SH may not be displayed.

Further, a hold number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold number display area 10SHHS, as in the hold display area 10SHH, the hold number of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. The display mode is a mode in which arithmetic numbers are displayed.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (B). To do.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (B) to (D), the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (B) to (D) in accordance with the action of the character swinging up the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (E) and 15-7 (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (E) and 15-7 (F) in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hammers that the character swings down hit the button image 10SHB and imitates a star from the button image 10SHB at the timing T4. The mode of various images is changed so that the effect image 10SHS of the "star" of the above is scattered. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect when the timing T4 is reached, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamps 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect as shown in FIG. 15-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect elapses, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and has a game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and whether the push button 31B is vibrating or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not. On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, the push button 31B can be focused on before the push button 31B vibrates, and the push button 31B can be pushed. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than that of the small symbol or the number of hold display. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small symbol or the number of hold display among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the constant small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, always has a lower priority than the small symbol.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the hold number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the front side of the layer for displaying the background image or the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (B) to 15-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed on the front side of the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the displays of the line-of-sight guidance effect, have higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is a display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (D), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the reach decorative symbol 10SH5L of the "left" and the reach decorative symbol 10SH5R of the "right".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the hold display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while the visibility of the small symbol and the number of holdings display is suitably ensured at all times.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (B) to 15-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. The high-priority constant small symbols and the number of pending displays are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display at all times. ..

(Modification example of feature part 10SH)
The invention according to the feature portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 of FIG. 15-3, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be set according to which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 is either a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, or the push button 31B is pressed for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is such that the push button 31B is vibrated over a period of 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow color. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light is executed, it is easy to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect. Further, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. That is, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect having higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect linked with the notice effect, there are a plurality of types depending on the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It may be possible to carry out the vibration effect of. Depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the bonus effect advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect linked with the highly reliable character advance notice effect. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking accessory notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character advance notice effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as an effect of increasing the chance in the advance notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or a winning opening. By doing so, the jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect that notifies the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball that has passed through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect. This vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the maximum number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among a plurality of options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored effect, thereby performing a big hit. It may be definitively notified that the maximum number of rounds executed in the game state is the maximum number of rounds among the plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the effect control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the time. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , It is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the timing before the timing T2, is started with the timing T2 at which the reach is established as a reference. , The timing T3 during the normal reach reach production, which is the timing after the timing T2, and the timing T4 during the super reach reach production are set to 3 seconds. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be different. For example, there are a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a second strength larger than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When making the push button 31B vibrate with the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the strength of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot may be common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed in each of the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , The jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. Make the jackpot reliability different in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a plurality of times capable of executing the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. It may be possible to execute only at any one of the timings of. For example, the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice can be executed, the vibration effect is announced as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Can be suitably recognized as having been executed.

When the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is executed, the big hit reliability in the variable display during execution is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continuously vibrates for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect. The vibration mode of the above is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, any of the cases where the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution can be executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, they are executed at specific timings. Even if the mode of the vibration effect executed by the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed by the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, it is a big hit. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed by the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the executed vibration effect is different, the jackpot reliability is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the models of the pachinko gaming machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, at the timing T2 when the reach is established, when the notification effect for notifying that the reach is established is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated while the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1, which is different from the first model, share the same execution pattern of vibration effect and jackpot reliability, vibration of the same execution pattern Regarding the production, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration effect is executed as an effect of increasing the chance of another effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect. While making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, and then has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach mode. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect that encourages the development of a reach mode. After the fanning effect is executed, there are cases where the reach mode has a high jackpot reliability and the display result is "missing" without developing into a reach mode with a high jackpot reliability. When developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning success effect that notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will be developed as a result of the effect of the fanning effect. On the other hand, if the display result is "off" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect result of the fanning effect does not develop into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. Perform a fanning failure production. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the fanning success production is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the fanning success production is executed.

The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the production may be the same emission color as the emission color. According to such a configuration, when the fanning success effect is executed, the display result may be "off" even if it develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, but the jackpot reliability is excessively increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

Further, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, not only the interest at the timing immediately before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed can be improved, but also the expectation for the vibration effect itself is increased, and the vibration effect is executed at other timings as well. It is possible to improve the interest of the time.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, it is advantageous to the player. The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color" even when the jackpot type is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among the multiple types of jackpots with different characteristics. To do. According to such a configuration, when the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is not misunderstood as if it is the "big hit" of the big hit type having the highest advantage. Can be.

When there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible not to provide an execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color". According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the push button 31B from becoming a "big hit" of a big hit type, which has a low advantage for the player, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration effect. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the vibration effect from being impaired.

The effect control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by utilizing the auditory effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration effect is being executed, and then gradually changes the specific sound effect from a small volume to a loud volume as a line-of-sight guidance effect. Output to change. According to such a configuration, a player who has difficulty in recognizing a line-of-sight guidance effect using a visual effect can be focused on the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

In the case where the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is used, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be different from that at a certain time. For example, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the set value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be higher than when the set value is "1". .. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result becomes a "big hit", it is possible to raise the expectation that the set value has a high degree of advantage.

When the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect depends on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emission color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when it is a set value of any one of "1" to "3" and when it is a set value of any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the vibration effect is a high setting that may be the setting value "6" that is most advantageous to the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may differ depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the set value is an even number that may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player by the vibration effect.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. It may be possible to carry out a vibration effect in a mode of emitting light. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to pay attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the mode when the vibration effect is executed.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. When the vibration effect of the mode of emitting light is enabled, the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. It may happen. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T1 and T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T2 becomes a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, not only can the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be increased, but also the attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T2 can be further increased. ..

The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T3 and T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T4 is a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, but also to pay more attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T4. Can be enhanced.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a vibration effect of not deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the above may be different. For example, in a vibration effect in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is not deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the mode in which the display result is not definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit" is monotonous, the display result is definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit". In the vibration effect of the above mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined time signature. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration effect in the mode of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed or at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the reach effect is suitably increased by preferably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

When the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emission color of the sh button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Or, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is executed at the timing T3, and the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is executed at the timing T4. To limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the credibility of the jackpot reliability can be prevented from being lowered.

When the vibration effect linked to the notice effect can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the notice effect and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect may be different. For example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the beat of the music played in the interlocking notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the sound effect when the character is operating. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is made to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to the notice effect or not linked to the notice effect. ..

The present box production may be made feasible. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character having a hammer as shown in FIG. 15-6 (B) may pop out from the opened present box, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed due to the execution of the present box effect.

When the operation effect for operating the push button 31B can be executed, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective during the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on in a manner different from the lighting mode. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the push button 31B is continuously lit in red for 3 seconds to vibrate the push button 31B. .. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is turned on in the operation effect, the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. It may be controlled so as to be a suggestion lighting mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever is effective during the lever operation effective period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is effective. In this case, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period to suggest lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special figure game or the like is not executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of the output music or background, and the image display. Settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of the device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like, may be changed. For example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed according to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed when the special figure game or the like is not executed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on, and the push button 31B in the operation effect is turned on in a mode different from the lighting mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 10SH)
In relation to the feature unit 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can perform a vibration effect in which the operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-051075 (see JP).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operating means is not in the player's field of view, it may not be possible to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effect is executed and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 10SH can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is a machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player. Is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a push button 31B). The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means that can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a player's It is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed), and the vibration effect executing means is , The vibration effect can be executed at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , Timing T2 where reach is established, timing T3 during execution of normal reach reach effect and timing during execution of super reach reach effect after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings of T4 and the like), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is produced in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is at any timing of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any timing of timing T3 and timing T4. However, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emission color are common), and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control The CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2) (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized in that the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may perform the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or the means 2. , The reach effect of super reach can be executed, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Is able to execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed).

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images. The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, an effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect). Is always lower in priority than small symbols, hold number display, various error notifications, hold display, active display, background image, higher priority than decorative symbols, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while suitably ensuring the visibility of predetermined information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 10SH is any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, and the vibration effect executing means has the vibration effect of the first aspect and the advantageous state over the first aspect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of the second aspect, which suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and push button 31B. It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in white and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, and the push button 31B is emitted for 1.5 seconds. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed, rather than when the vibration effect of vibrating and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, pachinko game). In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. At the same time, it may be easier to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration according to the feature portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

(Explanation of feature parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 16-1 shows a configuration example of the effect device related to the feature portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for effect, which is a movable effect device, is provided in front of the lower end, which is a lower edge portion on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. By transmitting the power from the operation motor, the movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, a solenoid for operation or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured by using a decorative member, and has a configuration capable of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player cannot see it. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed by using transparent glass or synthetic resin or as a simple opening, and has a structure capable of being seen through so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built in the operation stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or wholly formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light by turning on the lever lamp 9B1. Further, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be made to emit light.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the root position of the operation lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is possible to execute an operation unit effect including a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 is lit to cause one of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect. May be good. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be made to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect.

FIG. 16-2 (A) shows a setting example of the operation unit effect pattern used to execute the operation unit effect. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. The emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set according to each operation unit effect pattern. The emission color corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit effect corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern is executed. The usage corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed for each operation unit effect pattern.

The operation unit effect can be executed at a plurality of timings accompanying the progress of the variable display, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the hit / miss notification is triggered. The start of the pre-variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. When the reach is established, it is the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display is in the reach mode. The reach development is the timing corresponding to the case where the development production is executed along with the reach production of the super reach. The development effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect of the super reach is executed (development of the reach) after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. The hit / miss notification fanning is the timing corresponding to the fanning effect prior to the hit / miss notification effect that notifies whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), a plurality of operation unit effect patterns that can be used to execute the operation unit effect according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. In addition, different operation unit effect patterns are set to be usable according to a plurality of timings at which the operation unit effect can be executed.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and the reach effect of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. As the reach effect of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach effects including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach effect may include an effect in which the effect modes are different from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. The decision rate when the variable display result is "big hit" and the decision rate when the variable display result is not "big hit" are set so that the jackpot reliability according to each reach effect is obtained. Just do it. Depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random value for determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the reach effect of the super reach, the effect mode in the reach effect, etc. It should be possible to set.

The operation unit effect is executed at a predetermined ratio according to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", regardless of the specific effect that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the reach effect. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of. An operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also referred to as a single operation unit effect. On the other hand, there is a case where the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with the specific effect. The effect of light emission or vibration associated with such a specific effect is also called a specific interlocking effect.

FIG. 16-2 (B) shows a setting example when executing the specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when a specific interlocking effect is executed along with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, music reproduction, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. The emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can emit light as a part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as a part of the specific effect. As described above, since the specific interlocking effect can be executed as a part of the specific effect, the jackpot reliability is the same as that of the specific effect, and the original jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect. The light emission of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach effect of SP reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the maximum (for example, 16 rounds) of the second jackpot type. The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery effect related to the jackpot type according to the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end condition, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are notified in advance in the jackpot game state. It may be a lottery effect regarding the presence or absence of rank up and the amount of increase, which is the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, when it becomes possible to control the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that has won the V winning opening in the V winning attacker, the opening presence / absence and opening time of the V winning attacker , The number of times of opening, the end condition of the probability variation control, and the like, it may be possible to execute the lottery effect regarding the jackpot game state having different advantages. When it becomes possible to control from the small hit game state to the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the V prize due to the game ball entering the V prize attacker, the opening presence / absence, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the opening number of the V winning attacker, or It may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to a small hit game state or a big hit game state having different advantages depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and then the V by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker from the start of the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released. In the period until the winning of the prize, the vibration strong monitoring state may be controlled, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when the V prize is generated, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and the effect including the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect a vibration error than the strong vibration monitoring state. During the period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration strength monitoring state is controlled. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, an alarm image is displayed, an alarm sound is output, an alarm lamp is lit, an alarm signal is output, or a part or a combination of all of them is controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 120. It suffices if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped by controlling the CPU 103 in the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the notification of the vibration error due to the inappropriate abnormality determination or the stop state of the game.

FIG. 16-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 16-3 (A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. FIG. 16-3 (B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation. In the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC03, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation unit effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC13, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR1 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC21, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR2 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established and the effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on-period is set in accordance with the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC32, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be able to be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the vibration mode in which the on-period continues until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected in the effective detection period. It should be. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of the hit / miss notification. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC41, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes gold.

When the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not the effective detection period is provided may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, for example, the type of reach effect. Good. When an effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. You may control it. If the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light continuously in gold for a period of vibration. On the other hand, when an effective detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B be switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) of red, which is different from gold, every 150 milliseconds. It may be controlled so as to have a light emitting mode for the above. By executing the light emission effect of the light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is effective to operate the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A while executing the vibration effect. , Can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used to make the priority of light emission control different. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data. Lamp control data is set in the second lamp layer as a light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation so that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. To do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Priority is given to execution. As a result, the light emitting mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to preferentially become the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect rather than the light emitting mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach effects that serve as super reach may include a strong SP reach having a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach having a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of the strong SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed after the motion detection effect is executed by detecting the movement of the player which is the operation for the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's operation to be operated on the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be such that the period continues. In the reach effect of the weak SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibration mode may be set according to the vibration pattern AKV31 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit / fail notification effect. It should be noted that there may be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 5000 milliseconds, which is an effective detection period. It may be controlled to the vibration mode which becomes the period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled by switching between a period and an off period during which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the on period is such that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may be controlled according to the vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit gold light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emitting mode is switched between (lighting) and non-light emitting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A continuously vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light in gold.

The vibration pattern AKV41 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the screen display in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV43 is an on-period vibration mode linked to music reproduction in the reach production of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes blue due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes gold due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect changes from blue to gold through the red color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, and a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where it becomes. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes white due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

FIG. 16-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the emission colors of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have normal emission brightness set to be low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is different. It suffices to emit light so that it becomes white. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emitting so as not to emit light.

The effect execution example AKA01 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit white light is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation unit effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC11 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Both the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 has a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22. Even when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes white.

The effect execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit red light is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 and AKC12 is executed, the emission color becomes red. The operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC02 and AKC12 has a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of SP Reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes red is included.

The effect execution example AKA03 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in rainbow colors is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 and AKC13 is executed, the emission color becomes rainbow color. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC03 and AKC13 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the jackpot confirmation notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes rainbow color.

The effect execution example AKA04 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in pink is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC21 is executed, the emission color becomes pink. The operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11.

The effect execution example AKA05 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in orange is executed. When the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 is executed, the emission color becomes orange. The operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12.

The effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit blue light is executed. The emission color does not turn blue when the operation unit effect is executed. When the movable body movement of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes blue. Further, when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes blue is included.

The effect execution example AKV07 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit gold light is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC41 is executed, the emission color becomes gold. The operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of the success / failure notification. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes gold. Further, when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes gold is included.

As described above, the emission colors of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit effect, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the emission color, any emission mode such as emission time, number of emission (number of blinks), emission cycle (blinking cycle), and emission brightness can be set to the execution timing of the operation unit effect, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration effect. Depending on the mode, they may be different or may be common.

The operation unit effect can be executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or a continuous advance notice effect when it is executed at the start of the advance fluctuation. The pre-reading notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous notice effect continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect can be executed by using the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the special figure hold storage number at the time of starting winning is set and the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 16-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories is referred to, and a determination value matching the random value is assigned according to the judgment result at the time of winning. The decision may be made by determining the decision result.

FIG. 16-5 (A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is “2”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed.

FIG. 16-5 (B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “3”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When is, the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 16-5 (C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is “4”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 16-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous advance notice effect, to be executed. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (start opening winning designation command, hold storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of winning the start is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the read-ahead notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the notification content by the received command is specified, and for example, the winning judgment result is specified as the notification content by the winning judgment result command.

The winning judgment result uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , The result determined by the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the winning determination result, for example, one of a big hit, a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, a reach confirmation at the time of loss, and a general at the time of loss may be indicated. The jackpot winning determination result is a determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The winning judgment result of the super reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result. The winning judgment result of the reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss. Is. When the general winning judgment result at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range. It is a judgment result corresponding to.

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In addition, if the winning judgment result this time is either a big hit or a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, and if all the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the hold memory are general at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition May be possible. If the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading advance notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for pre-reading advance notice execution decision and referring to a pre-reading notice execution decision table prepared in advance stored in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, etc. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be determined as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect. In step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the determination result at this time is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When it is determined that "execution is performed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved storages may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, the continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a continuous effect pattern and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern can be determined. Should be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, the pre-reading advance notice flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the effect control flag setting unit) may be set to the ON state.

In such a look-ahead notice setting process, when the winning judgment result is either a big hit or a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, the look-ahead notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the look-ahead notice execution by step AKS102 is executed. It becomes possible to determine the presence / absence and the continuous production pattern by the step AKS105. Then, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, even if the winning judgment result is determined to be "executed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS102 at a higher rate than the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. Good. Further, in step AKS105, when the winning determination result is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from that in the case where the winning determination result is determined to be the super reach at the time of loss. In this way, it suffices if the continuous advance notice effect, which is the look-ahead advance notice effect, can be executed based on the winning determination result, which is the look-ahead determination result.

FIG. 16-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 16-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same even-numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it suffices if it is possible to determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the reach-off combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When deciding the combination of the fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data which is a random value for determining the symbol and referring to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the variable display content, the combination is determined. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, the operation unit effect is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the remaining number of times after subtraction is "0", the pre-reading advance notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the presence / absence of the operation unit effect corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect of the operation unit is extracted, and the operation unit effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation unit effect and the operation unit effect pattern used when executing the operation unit effect. The operation unit effect corresponding to this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit effect included in the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed. Is set.

In step AKS202, when the specific interlocking effect including the special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted. For example, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that all the operation unit effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while at the time of reach development or The execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at the timing corresponding to the hit / fail notification. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is set so that some operation unit effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. .. In addition, in the range of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that a part or all of the operation unit effect is not easily executed during the execution of the variable display. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation unit effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation unit effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the judgment result at the time of winning, the special effect is different from the case where the special effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation unit effect may be set so that a part or all of the operation unit effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation unit effect, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of effect control patterns (operation unit effect control patterns) prepared in response to the operation unit effect determined by step AKS202 and set them as the use pattern. Good. Further, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decorative pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image is displayed. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the variable start, the setting for updating the hold display and the like is made in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the hold display or the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 16-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) and an operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Contains control data used to control. The operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation unit effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, and the like. .. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation. Is preset. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data showing an output mode such as a sound effect linked to a variable display of a decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating a light emitting drive mode during variable display of the decorative pattern for a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's operation, such as a tilting operation for the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation for the trigger button, or a pressing operation for the push button 31B, and each operation. Data that indicates the mode of the effect operation according to the motion detection of the player, such as data that specifies the control content of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the on period and the driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these. You can. Further, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display during effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, it is determined. Controls the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9 and light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are controlled. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n, and the vibration control data # 1 to the vibration control data # n are the control of the effect operation in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

The operation unit effect control pattern is composed of, for example, process data including the effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body in the operation unit effect, such as lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating an on period and a drive mode of the vibration generator in the operation unit effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131. That is, the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect.

FIG. 16-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation unit effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. The timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation unit effect at the start of the pre-variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the pre-variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit effect is executed at a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation according to the number of remaining times. be able to. For example, when the number of remaining times is "3", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT01, and when the number of remaining times is "2", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT02. When is "1", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT03.

The timing AKT 11 shown in FIG. 16-9 is a timing at which the operation unit effect at the start of the target variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that is the target variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit based on the operation unit effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. At the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation after the effect is executed, the operation unit effect according to the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times of "0" can be executed. Further, at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation, the operation unit effect may be executed. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 to AKC13 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. be able to.

As in the case of timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be such that the operation unit effect can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , The operation unit effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. As described above, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIGS. 16-9, as the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time, the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the operation unit effect when the reach is developed, and the operation unit effect when the hit / fail notification is agitated Each is a feasible timing. For example, according to the operation unit effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation unit effect at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation unit effect, and there are cases where the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established. Can be done. Further, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development. Alternatively, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 is determined by step ASK202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification.

FIG. 16-10 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-10 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 16-10 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 16-10 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-10 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 300 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 16-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-11 (A) turns red and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-11 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-11 (A) becomes rainbow, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-11 (B). , It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 16-11 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 16-11 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light by shifting the emission colors of red, reddish purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in a plurality of sections such as the upper part and the lower part of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. It suffices if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 16-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-12 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-12 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 16-12 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 16-12 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 1500 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 16-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-13 (A) turns red and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 16-13 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 16-13 (A) becomes rainbow color and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 16-13 (B). , It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 16-13 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 3000 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 16-13 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit red light by alternately repeating the first brightness having a high emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission mode included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 changes the emission brightness in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. It becomes. As described above, as an effect mode of the light emission effect, not only the light emission color but also the light emission cycle may be different to suggest the jackpot reliability. In the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission, for example, every 20 milliseconds. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot reliability by making the light emission colors different. In this way, for example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle.

FIG. 16-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR1 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 16-14 (A). It includes a light emitting effect in which the emission color shown in (B) becomes pink, and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 16-14 (C) is used. The effect AKR1 that is an effect when the reach is established may be, for example, an effect that displays an effect image indicating the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect that displays a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 16-14 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times at predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 16-14 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in pink in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light.

FIG. 16-15 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR2 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 16-15 (A). It includes a light emitting effect in which the light emitting color shown in (B) turns orange and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 16-15 (C) is used. The effect AKR2, which is an effect when the reach is established, may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. It is sufficient that the effect mode is different between the effect AKR1 and the effect AKR2, which are the effects when the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 16-15 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating twice alternately, the vibration mode includes an on period of the second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 16-15 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. Further, when the on periods of the vibration effects are different vibration on times, the light emitting patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effect when the reach develops. , The vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, and the like. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC31. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS2 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC32. In any of the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect.

The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the hit / fail effect at the timing AKT14, which is the time of the hit / fail notification. ,including. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in gold according to the on period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. That is, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm out. As for the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, is executed. Includes things. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development become white with a common emission color, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 13 at the time of reach development, and the vibration effect is produced. The vibration mode of the above may be different. As in the case where the emission color becomes white, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect. Includes what is common. Further, as in the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission. It may include those having different light emitting modes of the effect. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development does not have to include an operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation and a light emission mode different from that of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification includes an operation unit effect such as an operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm out. The jackpot reliability of this operation unit effect is 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is 100% common between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. Further, the emission color is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the jackpot reliability is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the push button 31B and the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is that the emission color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform light emission effects. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target variation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 12 at the time when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. There are cases where the modes are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is such that the operation unit effect is performed by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32. Contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. Is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be produced. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game. The operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include an effect that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game.

The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is 100% regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability is 100% when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The vibration modes of the vibration effect include the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity driven by the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , It suffices if the arbitrary vibration patterns that vibrate the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are different, so that they can be made different.

The plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the movable body movement, the image display, the music reproduction, the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the reach effect of SP reach A, for example, the jackpot reliability is about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. Become. Since the movable body movement, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A are all executed as a part of the reach effect, they do not have the jackpot reliability individually. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect of deterministically notifying that the variable display result is a "big hit". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects according to the number of rounds and the like, corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. The jackpot confirmation notification and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach production of SP reach A in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is different from the production with a big hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific effects, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed for the specific effect having the jackpot reliability. It suffices if it is set as. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 16-16 shows an execution example of the effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit white light according to the background display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit red light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the background display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background. While the light is emitted so as to change from black to white according to the above, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display of the image display device 5 is a blue display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light in accordance with the character display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and the character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, variable display and the like are performed using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation unit effect is executed during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. It is possible to emit light in the light emitting mode of. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the operation unit effect is performed using the control data read from the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In contrast to the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect of the operation unit effect due to the predetermined effect. Is. In this way, the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit light by different light emitting modes. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by.

The predetermined effect may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the screen display of the image display device 5 or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in a emission color corresponding to the sound output of, for example, BGM, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light emission color of the light emission effect in the club effect may be emitted. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. Even in this way, by making the light emitting mode different between the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by light emission. In the predetermined effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is dimmed, and in addition to stopping the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. are not emitted (turned off). May be. When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 16-17 shows an example of setting an effect period in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red and then to gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. ..

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is to stop and display the confirmation decoration symbol that is the display result of the decoration symbol, to display the production image of the scene where the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character in the reach production, the speaker 8L, By outputting a big hit confirmation sound by 8R, turning on the big hit confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining a part or all of these, the player can recognize the big hit arbitrarily. It is sufficient if the notification of is executed.

In addition, following the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 accompanying the big hit confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the impression of the effect and improve the interest of the game by executing the specific interlocking effect accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification while increasing the expectation of the player by the effect of the operation unit. When executing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation unit effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or the specific light emitting effect may be used. The light emission mode may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give the effect a sharpness, it is possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, appropriately diversify the effect, and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in accordance with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes directing. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes luminescence effect.

16-18 to 16-20 show a case where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 16-18 shows production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 16-19 shows an effect execution example AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 16-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the reach production of SP reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position that is in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach effect of the SP reach A is started due to the reach development, the movable body operation is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linearly or parallelly moving upward from the initial position, and the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32 is "SP. An effect image showing a message such as "reach A" is displayed. After that, by continuing to change the position of the movable body 32, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed.

Example of effect execution A specific interlocking effect is executed according to the position change of the movable body 32 which is a movable body operation such as AKG01 and AKG02, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 16-17. , Including. Further, when the position of the movable body 32 is continuously changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. To do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front from the lower end front with respect to the display screen which is the initial position is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated over this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be performed in a vibration mode during which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the on-period. Alternatively, when the period is AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 250 milliseconds, which is switched between an on period and a non-vibrating off period. Further, the specific light emitting effect may be executed in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 250 milliseconds. May be good.

Production execution example When the movable body operation in the reach production of SP reach A such as AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the positions of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed, for example. As a result, the light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the emission color and the emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N have a blue emission color when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the emission brightness changes in a wavy shape according to the height and time. It suffices to emit light as if it were.

After the movement of the movable body is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A as in the effect execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "super hot" is performed in the gold display color. Further, as in the effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the display of the effect image to be an image display such as AKG11 and AKG12, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold in the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 16-17. Includes. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the reach effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the vibration that is the on period for continuously vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A over this period AKZ02. A special vibration effect may be performed depending on the embodiment. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds with the first brightness having a high golden emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

Example of effect execution When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A such as AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. The emission color may be gold according to the image display and the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, with the display of the effect image such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, the light may be emitted in a light emitting color different from the gold color.

After the display of the production image as in the production execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG21 as the music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the production execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG23. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 according to the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A can be executed.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the output of audio for playing music such as AKG21 to AKG23, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 and the emission color changing from blue to red in the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 16-17, and further. It includes a specific light emission effect that changes from red to gold. Production execution example In AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. Production execution example In the AKG23, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. As described above, it suffices to be able to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 16-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the production progresses as the music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21 (A), in the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed along with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, so, la, shi, and do The sound corresponding to the scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of the do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of the do that is output first.

The specific interlocking effect associated with such music reproduction is a light emission effect that is a specific light emission effect in which the emission color changes as shown in FIG. 16-21 (B), and a special emission effect based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 16-21 (C). It can be executed in the period AKZ03 corresponding to the music reproduction, including the vibration effect which is the vibration effect. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 16-21 (C) is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 16-21 (B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the sound output period corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration effect. The emission color of is changed in order between blue, red, and gold. During the period when the audio output is stopped and the period when the special vibration effect is off, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. In the sound output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be different for each scale. For example, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously made to emit blue light for a period of the scale of the first output. Next, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the first brightness having a high red light emission brightness and the second brightness having a low light emission brightness are alternately repeated during the period of the scale. After that, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) during the period of the scale of Mi. In this way, by setting the light emission mode in which the light emission amount is different for each light emission color according to each scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach effect of the SP reach A is executably controlled by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) is based on the lamp control data and the vibration control data, and is associated with a specific effect such as moving body movement, image display, and music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect is set to be executable. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 can be executed. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the stick controller 31A and the stick controller 31A have different vibration modes between the vibration effect in the operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed according to the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the operation member such as the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

When executing the operation unit effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are used to emit light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in accordance with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are moved by using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emission effect for emitting light is executed. A player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, by performing an effect including vibration and light emission of an operation member such as an operation lever of the stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, can display the image. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 16-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the operation of the movable body 32 which is the movable object operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. As described above, since the special vibration effect can be executed during the operation period of the movable body 32, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 16-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect due to the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light in association with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. Then, the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color is different between the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by making the light emitting mode different according to the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing of execution is determined by the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. Along with being different, the vibration mode is different. Further, the emission colors are white and red depending on the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be operated. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the members and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is executed by the operation unit effect at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation based on the winning determination result that is the pre-reading determination result. It is executed in the variable display before the variable display to be performed. In this way, by making the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed different, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

As shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the case where the emission color is red and the case where the emission color is rainbow. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect is an operation unit effect pattern in which the emission color in the light emission effect is different depending on the case where the remaining number of times is other than "0" and the case where the remaining number of times is "0". Some include. For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 16-5 (A) includes an operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operation unit effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , Including. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red. Therefore, the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. The light emission mode is different between the two. In this way, by providing a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. Is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 16-5 (A), in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". As a result, it is set to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 or the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is used as the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation unit effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target variation, even though the operation unit effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the pre-variation. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without lowering the expectation of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the emission color. Including the case where the emission color becomes white and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period and the off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. And non-light emission are repeated, and when the emission color turns red, light is continuously emitted according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the emission color becomes red. In that case, light is emitted intermittently according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. In the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the setting of the on period is different from each other, so that the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different.

(Modification example of featured parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko game machine 1, or the setting of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be different. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value of. In addition, regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage.

When the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different and common, the jackpot reliability is high. The combination of each case, such as a different case and a common case, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different and common between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, and when the vibration modes of the vibration effect and the special vibration effect are different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect The combination of each case can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. When the vibration modes of the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient that the control load of the light emission effect can be reduced by sharing the light emission mode of the light emission effect. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, it is sufficient that the control load of the vibration effect can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When some vibration modes in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration effect. For example, when the vibration intensities in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control load of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration cycle in the vibration effect. When some of the light emitting modes in the light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the light emitting effect can be reduced by sharing the other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect. For example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle in the light emission effect. It suffices if the control load can be reduced by the same standardization of the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small hit game state or a big hit game state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the player is controlled to the small hit game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to the opening / non-opening of the V winning attacker, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect with. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state, the end condition, and the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, and the like. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as a movable object movement in a small hit game state or a big hit game state, image display, and music reproduction.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the reach effect, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state is executed, it is specified in a part or all of the effect period. The interlocking effect may be executable.

When controlled to an arbitrary effect state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect may be executed. For example, when the effect is controlled to be the special effect mode, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed at a higher rate than when the effect state is controlled to be a different effect mode from the special effect mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of performing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a touch operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Further, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of photographing the player's hand or the like using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the movement by the player can be detected. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation by the player may be used. A contact member that allows the player to come into contact with a hand or the like may be provided together with such a motion detection member, and the contact member may be vibrated or emitted light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. ..

The vibration effect included in the operation unit effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation can correspond to the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation can correspond to the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. The light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect is associated with the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect of the feature unit 48AK, the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect of the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect of the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the light emission effect. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is the light emission associated with the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the production. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the light-emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Can be accommodated. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the feature portion 49AK.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the mode of shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates is adopted. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed. ) May be used.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small hit symbols and symbols displayed as missed symbols. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving state is already set, even if the number of time-saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction starts, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an operating means that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect executing means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and an operating means that accompanies the vibration effect. It is equipped with a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect. The aspect is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The fact that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed is, for example, a big hit according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern. It may be reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, the emission color and the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed, and vibration. The mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode associated with the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The vibration effect can be executed, and the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the line-of-sight at the first timing. It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 49AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and a vibration effect that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as an operation means that the player can operate and a vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. A predetermined vibration effect is provided with an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect according to the progress of the game. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the above, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect according to the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. .. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emitting effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting state color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, a reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability may be sufficient. The ability to execute the special vibration effect may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The difference in vibration mode between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed is controlled to an advantageous state when executed is common. , The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. .. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., which are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means is the first timing. In, the line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation of 50% or more, which is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

The specific effect executing means can execute an effect of operating the movable member as a specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of operating the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect with the notification that the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is performed in an advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit confirmation notification. The special vibration effect associated with this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting effect executing means can execute a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting mode differs between the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect. May be good. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, when the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the special vibration effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the effect of the operation unit in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 50AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect as the operation means that can be operated by the player and the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. It is provided with a vibration effect executing means and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the vibration effect is executed more when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. However, the vibration mode is different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration effect may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern may be sufficient. The timing of execution differs between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, the timings of the start of the pre-variation, AKT01 to AKT03, which are different from the timings of the start of the target variation, AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, or rainbow. And so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. It is common and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

Even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the vibration mode is different. Good. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. May be good. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode associated with the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light with. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The second vibration effect can be executed, and the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. The line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the pre-reading determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a first vibration light emitting mode and a second vibration light emitting mode different from the first vibration light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first vibration light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emitting mode at the time of the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The light emitting mode at the time of the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode may be different between the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the emission color of the operation unit effect pattern is different from the case where the residual number of times is "0". All you need is.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation relating to the association of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 For game control Microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
131 Vibration motor 75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 1st production unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 2nd production unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 3rd production unit 800 4th production Unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED substrate

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Electronic components that are visible to the player and
A specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component,
A translucent member that is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
With
The translucent member has a decorative pattern formed so as to straddle the electronic component and the specific member.
further,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect, and a vibration effect executing means.
A light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a light emitting effect executing means.
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect according to the progress of the game.
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect.
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images